316
2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................ . ii Your Vehicle at a Glance .................................................................................................................... . 4 Driver and Passenger Safety ............................................................................................................. . 7 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 59 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Features ............................................................................................................................................ 105 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 185 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 197 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 227 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 265 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information ..................................................................................................................... 285 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 299 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 303 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. Important Handling Information .................................................................................................... . iii

2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................4Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................7Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 59Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Features ............................................................................................................................................ 105How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 185What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 197The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 227The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 265This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 285ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 299A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 303How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... IService Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Important Handling Information .....................................................................................................iii

Page 2: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Pilot. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S9VC30

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to thestate of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Page 4: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

--

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

on the vehicle.

A Few Words About Safety

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Page 5: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.

Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

198223Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iii

Page 6: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If equipped.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

GAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL REAR A/C CONTROL

SHIFT LEVER (A/T)DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG(P. 11, 28)

REAR VIEW MIRROR WITHCOMPASS

FRONT PASSENGER’SAIRBAG

GLOVE BOX

(P. 70)

(P. 82)

(P. 93)

(P. 94)

(P. 188)

(P. 187) (P. 97) (P. 113)

(P. 200)(P. 177)

(P. 115)

(P. 11, 28)

(P. 106)

(P. 99)

Vehicle with rear entertainment system is shown.

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS(P. 61)

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

HEATING/COOLINGSYSTEM

Page 7: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

* *

**

If equipped.To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Honda’’ logo.

1 ::

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P. 96)

(P. 102)

(P. 75)MOONROOF BUTTONS HORN

(P. 77)

(P. 204)VTM-4 LOCK

(P. 35)

(P. 77)

(P. 74)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P. 138) (P. 78) (P. 175)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

VSA OFF SWITCH(P. 212)

CRUISE CONTROLMASTER BUTTON(P. 175)

1

1

1

Page 8: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

6

Page 9: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 156. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 23...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23

Additional Information About..........................Your Airbags . 25

......Airbag System Components . 25How Your Front Airbags

....................................Work . 28......................Advanced Airbags . 30

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 33..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 34

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 36...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 38

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 38

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 39

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 41

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 41

...Additional Safety Precautions . 42Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 43.......................Protecting Infants . 43

.........Protecting Small Children . 44.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51...........Protecting Larger Children . 53

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 53..................Using a Booster Seat . 54

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 55

...Additional Safety Precautions . 56.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

...................................Safety Labels . 58

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

Page 10: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat

(see pages ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

15

56

227

38

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

8

Page 11: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(7)(10)

(9) (3) (1) (4)

(2)(6)(10)

(7) (8)(5)

(2)

(11)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags(11) Side Curtain Airbags

Page 12: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Seat Belts

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

What You Should Do:

Why Wear Seat Belts

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 13: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page formore information on how your sidecurtain airbags work).

28

3133

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

Page 14: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even where seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

38 56

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features, Protecting Adults and Teens

Protecting Adults and Teens

IntroductionAirbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

12

Page 15: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the

rear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate are closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate monitor indicator

on the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door or the tailgate isnot tightly closed.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doormonitor indicator works.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down (seepage ).

6682

78

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors 2.1.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Page 16: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

87

87

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 17: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

The second row and third row centerseats have a detachable shoulderbelt that can be unlatched andretracted to allow the seats to befolded down. See page for how tounlatch and relatch the seat belts.Adjust the driver’s head restraint so

the back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

18

91

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4. 5.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Page 18: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Protecting Adults and Teens

16

RELEASEBUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 19: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Pull out the anchor latch and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Insert the hook at the end of theanchor latch into the anchor buckleby lining up the triangle marks onthe anchor latch and buckle. Makesure the belt is not twisted. Push theanchor latch until it locks. Thenfollow the procedure for fasteningand positioning an ordinary seat belt(see page ).15

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in theCenter Position

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

LATCH PLATE

ANCHOR LATCH ANCHOR BUCKLE ANCHOR LATCH

Using a seat belt with thedetachable seat belt anchorunlatched increases the chanceof serious injury or death in acrash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachable seatbelt anchor is correctly latched.

Page 20: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert a key into the slot on the sideof the small buckle. Line up thetriangle marks on the plate andbuckle when reattaching the belt andbuckle.

21

Protecting Adults and Teens

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

18

TRIANGULAR MARK

SMALL LATCH PLATE

Page 21: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 22: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other solid objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach solid objects on ornear a door.

Protecting Adults and Teens

20

Page 23: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all eight seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts.If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a small child isriding there, the indicator will notcome on and the beeper will notsound.

The seat belts use the samemonitoring system as the frontairbags. The system may not workproperly under these conditions:

Placing heavy items on the frontpassenger’s seat.

The front passenger is not sittingproperly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer if the indicator comes on orthe beeper sounds when there is nofront passenger or objects on thefront seat.

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

Page 24: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseat of the second and third rowseats is equipped with a detachableanchor that has two parts: a smalllatch plate and a buckle.

The detachable anchor shouldnormally be latched whenever theseats-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable anchor (see page ).

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

49

18

15

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt

22

Page 25: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause a front, side, or sidecurtain airbag to inflate.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.

254

Honda Warranty Information

do not deploy

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

Page 26: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

24

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 27: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

(1) (2)(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(8) (10)(8)

(7)

(9)

(9)

(11)

(5)

(4)(14)

(13)

(12)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Position Detection System(OPDS) Sensors

(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit

(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners(14) Roll Rate Sensor

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Position Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

Page 28: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. All pillarsare marked ‘‘SIDE CURTAINAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

28

31

33

Additional Information About Your Airbags

26

(15) Rear Safing Sensor(16) Side Impact Sensor (second)(17) Side Curtain Airbags

(16)

(17)

(15)

Page 29: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automatically turnthe airbag off (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight of an infant orsmall child is detected, thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A roll rate sensor that monitorsthe degree and rate your vehiclemay roll over and automaticallydeploy the side curtain airbags andactivate the front seat belttensioners if needed (see page ).

23

30

31

34

33

33

34

35

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

Page 30: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 35

How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

28

Page 31: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

CONTINUED

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

29

Page 32: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS Indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in the front, ifthe sensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child, the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Advanced Airbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

30

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

Page 33: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat. If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.

35

254

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

Page 34: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans into the sideairbag’s path.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

35Side Airbag Cutoff System

Additional Information About Your Airbags

32

Page 35: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the roll rate sensor detects yourvehicle is about roll over, the controlunit will instantly deploy both sidecurtain airbags.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

CONTINUED

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

33

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Page 36: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

63

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Additional Information About Your Airbags

34

U.S. CanadaIgnoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Page 37: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect an infant or small child maybe in the front passenger’s seat. Itdoes mean there is a problemwith the airbag.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

If the indicator comes on with nopassenger in the front, or with anadult in the seat, there may be aproblem with the advanced airbagsystem. Have the vehicle checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. models Canadian models

2WD4WD

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

Page 38: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during the crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

An airbag ever inflates.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Airbag Service

36

Page 39: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

If water or another liquidsoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag cutoffsystem from working properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

Page 40: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

--

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

43 5253 56

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

38

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

Page 41: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

53

35

CONTINUED

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Page 42: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard (onU.S. models, the dashboard label isremoved by the owner) and on thefront visors. Please read and followthe instructions on these labels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

40

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

Page 43: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

53

18

18

13

Protecting Children General Guidelines

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Page 44: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

83

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

42

Page 45: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CONTINUED

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Page 46: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

35

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

44

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 47: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to

provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outersecond row seats.

47

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Page 48: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

46

Page 49: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer second rowseats. The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

LOWERANCHORS

BUTTON

Rigid-type

Page 50: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

4.

5.

6.

7.

91

Installing a Child Seat

48

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

Flexible-type

Page 51: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

Page 52: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

50

Page 53: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle has attachment pointsfor a tether-style child seat to beinstalled on the second or third rowas shown.

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seat-back.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Lift the head restraint, then routethe tether strap over the seat-backbetween the legs of the headrestraint.

1.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Second Row Installation

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Page 54: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether attachment point, andtighten the strap according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.Make sure the strap is not twisted.

There are three anchorage points onthe tailgate sill. Select the anchoragepoint you want to use, and slide thecover to open it (outboard anchor),or remove the cover (center anchor).

Follow steps 1 and 2 of the secondrow seat installation.

2.

Installing a Child Seat

Third Row Installation

52

Page 55: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Page 56: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intend

to drive.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

4.

5.

3.

45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

54

Page 57: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

16 53

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

Page 58: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Larger Children

56

Page 59: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

57

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 60: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label, which is removedby the owner), contact your dealerfor a replacement.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

U.S. models only

Canadian models

U.S. models

U.S. models onlyU.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

RADIATOR CAP

HOOD

DASHBOARD SUN VISOR

DOORJAMBS

Page 61: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 70

...................................Trip Meter . 70.....................................Odometer . 70

..................................Fuel Gauge . 70...................Temperature Gauge . 71

Outside Temperature...................................Indicator . 71

..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 72Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 73.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 74

Turn Signal, Headlights,...................................Fog Lights . 75

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 76

............Daytime Running Lights . 76........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

.................Hazard Warning Button . 77

.................Rear Window Defogger . 77..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 78

...............................Keys and Locks . 79........................Immobilizer System . 79

................................Ignition Switch . 81

......................................Door Locks . 82......................Power Door Locks . 82

........................................Tailgate . 82..............Childproof Door Locks . 83

.......................Remote Transmitter . 83....................................Seat Heaters . 86

.................................................Seats . 87..............................Head Restraints . 91

.............................................Mirrors . 92..............................Power Windows . 94

.........................................Moonroof . 96.................................Parking Brake . 97

...........Interior Convenience Items . 98.......................Beverage Holders . 99

...............Console Compartment . 99....................................Glove Box . 99

....................Sunglasses Holder . 100...................................Sun Visor . 101

............................Vanity Mirror . 101........Accessory Power Sockets . 101

...............................Interior Lights . 102

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

Page 62: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

* If equipped.

Control Locations

60

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL

GAUGES

SHIFT LEVER (A/T)

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

(P.70)

(P.82)

(P.93)

(P.94)

(P.188)

(P.187) (P.97)

(P.200) (P.177)REAR VIEW MIRROR WITHCOMPASS

(P.115)

(P.113)

(P.106)

:

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS(P.61)

HEATING/COOLINGSYSTEM

Page 63: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If equipped.The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

:

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM (VSA) INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

TPMS INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR(P.69)

(P.69)

(P.69)

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITORTIRE PRESSUREMONITOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.67)

(P.68)

(P.64)

VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.68)

FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR(P.68)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.62) (P.62)

(P.64)

(P.67)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.63)

(P.65)

(P.66)

(P.65)

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR (P.65)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.64)

(P.67)

(P.63)

PARKING BRAKEAND BRAKESYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP (P.62)

BRAKE LAMPINDICATOR (P.66)

(P.63)

Page 64: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you and yourfront passenger have not fastenedyour seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

21

277

276

276

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

62

Page 65: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis on, your vehicle still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lockbrakes. For more information, seepage .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you try to drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system, side curtainairbags, automatic seat belttensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

33

34

278

210

Instrument Panel Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada

U.S. Canada

Page 66: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour vehicle checked by your dealer.Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal driving ability, but will nothave VSA traction and stabilityenhancement. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willgo off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position.

1.

2.

3.

211

211

211

79

Instrument Panel Indicators

VSA Activation IndicatorVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

64

Page 67: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition to the ON (II) position.If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the TirePressure Monitor, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service

for more information.

The appropriate tire indicator willcome on along with the low tirepressure indicator if a tire isextremely underinflated or hassuddenly lost pressure. See

for what todo if this indicator comes on.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator and the tirepressure monitor will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

266

205

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

LowTire Pressure Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

65

(see page 278 ). Refer to page

Page 68: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If a brake light does not work, theindicator comes on

when you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch in the ON (II)position.

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the tailgate or anydoor is not closed tightly.

All of the indicators in the monitordisplay come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

249 252

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor

Instrument Panel Indicators

66

BRAKE LAMP

Page 69: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Canadian models only

Canadian models only

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position with the headlightswitch off and the parking brake set.It should go off if you turn on theheadlights or release the parkingbrake. If it comes on at any othertime, it means there is a problemwith the DRL. There may also be aproblem with the high beamheadlights.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the daytime running lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 1.80 U.S. gal (7.0 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

175

75

76

243

High Beam IndicatorDaytime Running LightsIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

67

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

Page 70: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. It should come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

If the indicator blinks while driving,the VTM-4 fluid temperature is toohigh. Pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, shift to Park, and letthe engine idle until the indicatorgoes out.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked.

While the engine is operating in itsmost economical range, thisindicator may come on and stay on.

4WD models only 4WD models only 2WD models only

A/T TemperatureIndicator

VTM-4 Indicator Fuel Economy Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

68

Continuing to drive with the A/Ttemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

Page 71: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. See page

for information on fog lightoperation.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

229

75

On EX and EX-L models

Instrument Panel Indicators

Lights On Indicator Fog Light Indicator Maintenance MinderIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

Page 72: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the outside temperaturedisplay (except LX models) bypressing the Select/Reset knobrepeatedly.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

Trip Meter

Odometer

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

70

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TRIP METERINFORMATION DISPLAY

TRIP METERSELECT/RESETKNOB

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Page 73: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

± ±

- - - -- - - -

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle white mark. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper white mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetknob for 10 seconds. The followingsequences appear, 1 second at atime: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the Select/Reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is shown in theinformation display.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

242

On EX and EX-L modelsTemperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

Page 74: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears in the information displayafter you start the engine. Turn theengine off and confirm the fuel cap isinstalled. If it is, loosen the cap, thenretighten it until it clicks at leastonce. When you restart the engine,the message appears again. To scrollto another message, press the select/reset knob.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel fill cap, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL goesout after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If it does not go out, haveyour dealer inspect the vehicle. Formore information, see page .

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

229277

Gauges

Check Fuel Cap Indicator Maintenance Minder Display

72

Page 75: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

** If equipped.

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Honda’’ logo.:1 :

Controls Near the Steering WheelInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

HAZARD WARNING BUTTONHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

VSA OFF SWITCH

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

(P.96)

(P.102)

(P.212)

CRUISE CONTROLMASTER BUTTON(P.175)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P.138)

(P.78)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS(P.175)

(P.75)HORN

(P.77)

VTM-4 LOCK(P.204)

(P.35)

(P.77)

(P.74)

MOONROOF BUTTONS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

1

1

1

Page 76: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

---

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.Hold past ON to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spray therear window washer.OFFRotate the switchcounterclockwise to spray thewindow washer without activatingthe wiper.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

1.

2.

3.4.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

MIST

LO

OFF

INT

HI

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

74

Page 77: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

--

To turn on the highbeams, push the lever forward untilyou hear a click. The blue high beamindicator will come on (see page ).To turn off the high beams, pull thelever back. To flash the high beams,pull the lever farther back, and thenrelease it. The high beams remain onuntil the lever is released.

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever inthe proper direction and hold it. Thelever will return to center when yourelease it or complete a turn.

Turning the switchon the left lever to the positionturns on the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the

position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.Turn signal

OffParking and indicator lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights off (if equipped)Fog lights on (if equipped)

67

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

On EX and EX-L models

High BeamsTurn Signal

Headlights

Fog Lights

Turn Signal, Headlights, and Fog lightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

75

Page 78: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn the switchto the ‘‘ ’’ position.

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, side markerlights, license plate lights, andinstrument panel lights within 15seconds of removing the key fromthe ignition switch and closing thedriver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, thenopen and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

On EX and EX-L modelsInstrument Panel Brightness

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

76

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

Page 79: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and bothindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove the button comes on to showthe defogger is on. If you do not turnit off, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window DefoggerInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON EX and EX-L models LX models

Page 80: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints to your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

78

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Page 81: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

CONTINUED

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALET KEY(GRAY)

Page 82: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go out. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

Immobilizer System

80

Page 83: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of thelights on the instrument panel comeon as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

LOCK (0)

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

START (III)

Ignition SwitchInstrum

entsand

Controls

81

Page 84: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To lock the doors and the tailgate,press the master door lock switch oneither front door, press the lock tabdown on the driver’s door, or use thekey on the outside lock on the driver’sdoor.

Pressing up on either master doorlock switch will unlock all of thedoors and the tailgate.

The lock tab on any door locks andunlocks that door. To unlock thedriver’s door from the outside, turnthe key and release it. If you turnand hold it, all doors and the tailgateunlock.

To lock the all doors when gettingout of the vehicle, push the lock tabdown and close the door. To lock thedriver’s door, remove the key fromthe ignition switch and push the locktab down or push the under of themaster switch, then close the door.

With the key in the ignition switch,you cannot lock the all doors fromthe outside by master door lockswitch or the lock tab on the driver’sdoor.

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up. To close the tailgate, usethe inner handle to pull it down, thenpress down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate and the hatch glassclosed at all times while driving toavoid damaging the tailgate and thehatch glass, and to prevent exhaustgas from getting into the interior.See onpage .57

Power Door Locks Tailgate

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

82

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TAB

Page 85: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors andthe tailgate. Some exterior lights willflash twice each time you press thebutton.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior and interior lights will flash.When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset. You cannot lock it if any door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on the interiorlight control switch position, willcome on (see page ). If you donot open any door, the lights stay onfor about 30 seconds, then go out. Ifyou relock the doors and the tailgatewith the remote transmitter before30 seconds have elapsed, the lightswill go off immediately.

If you do not open any door within 30seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

102

CONTINUED

Childproof Door Locks UNLOCK

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Childproof Door Locks, Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

83

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

LED

LOCK LEVER

Unlock

Lock

Page 86: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Battery type: CR1616

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

1.

2.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter Care

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

84

SCREW

Page 87: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Install the parts in reverse order.

3.

4.

5.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

85

BATTERY

TAB

Page 88: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use the heaters.

Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

If equipped

Seat Heaters

86

SEAT HEATER BUTTONSSEAT HEATER BUTTONS

Page 89: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat back angle.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14On EX and EX-L models On EX and EX-L models

Driver’s Lumbar SupportPower Seat Adjustment

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

Page 90: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom, and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe front seat cushion. Then try tomove the seat to make sure it islocked into position.

On LX modelsManual Seat Adjustments Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment

Seats

88

Page 91: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To change the angle of the seats inthe second row seat-backs, pull upthe handle on the seat-back. Movingthe short vertical switch forward orbackward adjusts the seat back inthose directions.

The left and right halves can befolded separately.

Push the whole seat backwards untilfully latches. Make sure the seat islocked and secured before driving.

If you are folding the left half ofthe seat, use the ignition key torelease the center seat belt fromthe detachable anchor (see page

).

Lower the head restraint fully.

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position. Makesure the seat is locked and securedbefore driving.

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the outside of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and the seat will slide forward.

To adjust the seats forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion. After moving theseat, make sure it is locked intoposition.

2.

3.

1.

4.

18

Adjusting the Second Row Seats Folding the Second Row Seats Third Seat Access

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

SECONDROW SEAT RELEASE LEVER

Page 92: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Remove the head restraints bypushing the release buttons andpulling the restraints out.

Store the head restraints underthe cargo area floor. Insert theshafts into the holes in the sides ofthe storage compartment.

Use the ignition key to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor (see page ).

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Make sure you clip the small latchplate of each outer shoulder belt tothe seat belt webbing whenever thethird seat is folded.

Pull the handle on the back of theseat, move the seat-back to thedesired position and release thehandle. Let the seat-back latch intothe new position.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

Reinstall the head restraints,reconnect the seat belts, and makesure the seats are secured beforedriving.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to its upright position.1.

2.

3.

4.

18

193

Adjusting the Third Row Seat Folding the Third Row Seat

Carrying Cargo

Seats

90

THIRD ROWSEAT HANDLE

Page 93: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The head restraints in the secondand third row seats adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. To raise it, pull upward. Tolower it, push the release buttonsideways, and push the restraintdown.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

Head Restraints

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 94: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The rear view mirror has a compassfunction to indicate the vehicle’sdirection.Refer to on page .177

If equipped

Seats, Mirrors

Mirrors

Compass

92

TAB

Page 95: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch to keep yoursettings.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

3.

4.

Power Mirror Heaters(If equipped)

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

93

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

SELECTOR SWITCH

Page 96: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

The passenger windows cannot beraised or lowered if the MAIN switchis OFF. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

To open the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down, then release it. To stopthe window from going all the waydown, pull back on the windowswitch briefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. To stop the windowfrom going all the way up, pushdown on the window switch briefly.

Power Windows

AUTO

94

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 97: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

Power Windows

AUTO REVERSE

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

Page 98: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button

. To close the moonroof, pressand hold the upper button . Toopen the moonroof, press and holdthe lower button . Release thebutton when the moonroof gets tothe desired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delayfunction. You can still open and closethe moonroof for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay function cancels assoon as you open either front door.You must then turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position tooperate the moonroof.

If equipped

Moonroof

96

CLOSE BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

TILT-UPBUTTON

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Page 99: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, push on the pedal again.The parking brake indicator on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully released(see page ).63

Parking BrakeInstrum

entsand

Controls

97

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

Page 100: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Interior Convenience Items

98

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

GLOVE BOX

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

BEVERAGE HOLDERS(EX and EX-L models)

(EX-L models)

SUNGLASS HOLDERWITH CONVERSATIONMIRROR

VANITY MIRROR

VANITY MIRRORSUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

Page 101: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the rear door pocket beverageholders when you close the reardoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets. Thefront beverage holders can beinstalled under the slide.Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the parking lights are on.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.

Pivot the door of the console forwardand you can store a cellular phone, asmall notepad, and business cards init.

Interior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 102: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The sunglasses holder uses a convexmirror for its bottom panel. You cansee all the vehicle passengers on thismirror. To use the mirror, open thesunglasses holder fully, push it to thefirst detent, and release it.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

On EX-L models

Interior Convenience Items

Sunglasses Holder Conversation Mirror

100

Push

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

Page 103: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip and swing it out. Slidethe extension out to get morecoverage on side windows.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe sun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit.

The light comes on when you pull upthe cover.

The light will not come on if the sunvisor is slid outward.

Sun Visor Accessory Power SocketsVanity Mirror

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

101

SUN VISOR

EXTENSION

Page 104: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

There is a 115 volt AC power outletin the rear compartment on thedriver’s side. To use the AC poweroutlet, open the rear compartmentlid and open the outlet cover. Insertthe plug into the receptacle slightly,turn it 90° clockwise, then push inthe plug all the way.

Always run the engine when you usethe AC Power Outlet.

The maximum capacity for thispower outlet is 115 volt AC at 100watts or less. If you use an appliancewhich requires more than 100 watts,it automatically stops supplying thepower. If this happens, turn theignition switch off and turn it onagain.

The AC power outlet is notdesigned for electric applianceswhich require high initial peakwattage such as cathode-ray tubetype televisions, refrigerators,electric pumps, etc. It is also notsuitable for devices that processprecise data such as medicalequipment or measuring instruments.Any appliances that require anextremely stable power supply suchas microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,should not be connected to thisoutlet.

ONAll the individual map lights comeon.

None of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off withthe switches next to the lights.

When this switch is in the position:

When the switch is in the OFF position:

If equipped

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights

AC Power Outlet Light Control Switch

102

NOTE:

DOORACTIVATEDPOSITION OFF

ON

Page 105: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

DoorActivated

The courtesy light between the maplights comes on when you turn theparking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

The individual map lights come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened, or when the remotetransmitter is used to unlock thedoors.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows can beturned on and off by pressing thelens.

The tailgate light comes on whenyou open the tailgate if the lightswitch is in the ON position.

The lights go out about 6 secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed. With any door or thetailgate left open, the lights stayon about 3 minutes, then go out.

Turn on the front and second rowindividual map lights by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can also operate these lightswith the light control switch (seepage ).

The light in the tailgate has an on-offswitch to control if the light comeson when the tailgate is opened.

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors and around the ignition switchcome on when you open any door.After you close the door, the ignitionswitch light stays on for severalseconds.

102

When the switch is in theposition:

Interior Lights

Courtesy LightsIndividual Map Lights

Tailgate Light

Individual Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

Page 106: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

104

Page 107: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 106.......................Air Flow Buttons . 107

......Automatic Climate Control . 112.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 113

................................Audio System . 115..........................Playing the Radio . 117........................Radio Reception . 122

...Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 124................................Playing a Disc . 130

....................Disc Changer . 131, 134.................Protecting your CDs . 135

...Disc Player Error Messages . 136Disc Changer Error

...............................Messages . 137................Remote Audio Controls . 138.................Radio Theft Protection . 139

..........................Setting the Clock . 140........Rear Entertainment System . 142

............................Security System . 174...............................Cruise Control . 175

.........................................Compass . 177HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 180.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 184

On EX and EX-L models

FeaturesF

eatures

105

Page 108: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Vents, Heating, and A/C

106

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

FAN CONTROLDIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

MODE CONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIALAUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

TEMPERATUREDISPLAY

REAR A/CMANUAL BUTTON

LX MODEL

EX and EX-L MODEL

Page 109: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

Select the fan speed by pressing thefan control buttons ( or ).The fan speed is shown in verticalbars in the display.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

The temperature setting is shown inthe display.

On EX and EX-L models, see pagefor information on automatic

climate control and semi-automaticoperation.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. On LXmodels, the indicator in the button ison when the A/C is on. On EX andEX-L models, you will see A/C ONor A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set the dial belowthe outside air temperature.

Press the RR A/C MANUAL buttonto adjust the temperature of the rearpassenger compartmentindependently. See page forinformation using the rear A/C unit.

112

113

On LX models

On EX and EX-L models

On EX and EX-L models

On EX and EX-L models

On EX and EX-L models

Fan Control

Recirculation Button

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

RR A/C MANUAL Button

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

107

Page 110: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control dial or buttonto select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard. In this mode, you cannotturn off the A/C and also cannotswitch to fresh air mode.

When you switch to from, the A/C stays on, and you

can turn it on and off manually.

When you switch to another mode,the A/C returns to its original setting,either on or off, as displayed by theA/C indicator.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.In this case, you cannot turn the A/Coff.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

77

On EX and EX-L models

On EX and EX-L models

On LX models

On LX models

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

MAX A/C

Vents, Heating, and A/C

108

Page 111: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected (LX model), or thedisplay shows A/C ON (EX andEX-L models).Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

1.2.3.

5.

71

Using the HeaterVentilation Using the A/C

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

109

Page 112: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator (LX model) or theA/C ON indicator in the display(EX and EX-L models) will not bedisplayed if it was previously off.Adjust the temperature controldial so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial to your preference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

The vehicle has two A/Cunits, one is in the front, and theother is in the rear. The LX units areindependently controlled. The EXand EX-L units are controlled by thefront panel controls, unless the RRA/C MANUAL button is selected.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C mode.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.2.

3.

If the interior is very warm,

On LX models

To Defog and DefrostTo Dehumidify the Interior

Vents, Heating, and A/C

110

NOTE:

Page 113: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton until the indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

When you press again or theMODE button, the A/C returns to itsoriginal setting, either on or off, asdisplayed by the A/C ON or A/COFF indicator. If the original settingis A/C OFF, the system switches toAUTO.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator (LX model) or theA/C ON indicator in the display(EX and EX-L models) will not bedisplayed if it was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below it. This willsend more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents.Continuous use of the recirculationmode can cause humidity to build upinside the vehicle. Once thewindshield is clear, select the freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

1.

2.3.

On LX models

On EX and EX-L models

Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

111

Page 114: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL in the display to go out.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see FULL AUTO inthe system’s display.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at full coolingor heating only. It does not regulatethe interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

When thesystem is in FULL AUTO, the rearA/C passenger control dial cannotbe used. Pressing the button disablesthe FULL AUTO function.

Turning the fan control dial to theoff position shuts the system off.

If you press OFF, the climate controlsystem shuts off completely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

1.2.

Rear A/C Control

On EX and EX-L models

On EX and EX-L models

On LX models

Semi-automatic OperationAutomatic Climate Control

To Turn Everything Off

LoHi

Vents, Heating, and A/C

112

Page 115: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

A passenger in the second row canuse the rear fan control dial to adjustthe amount of airflow to the rearpassenger compartment.

Press the RR A/C MANUAL buttonto enable the rear temperaturecontrol dial; a second row passengercan now adjust the temperature inthe rear passenger compartmentwith the rear temperature controldial. OFF (center) The rear A/C unit

shuts off.

Cool Air Turn this dialcounterclockwise to increase theairflow.

Warm Air Turn this dial clockwiseto increase the airflow.

When the RR A/C MANUAL buttonis on, you can adjust the temperatureof the rear passenger compartmentmanually from the second row seat.

When the RR A/C MANUAL buttonis off, the temperature in the rearpassenger compartment is controlledby the front passenger with frontcontrol panel.

CONTINUED

On LX models

On EX and EX-L models

On LX models On EX and EX-L modelsUsing the Rear A/C Unit

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

113

COOL AIR WARM AIR

REAR A/C MANUAL BUTTON

Page 116: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

OFF (center) The rear A/C unitshuts off.

Cool Air Turn this dialcounterclockwise to increase thetemperature.

Warm Air Turn this dial clockwiseto increase the temperature.

On EX and EX-L models

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Vents, Heating, and A/C

114

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

COOL AIR WARM AIR

Page 117: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Some models may have one of theaudio systems described in thissection.Read the appropriate pages in thissection for operation of the audiosystems installed in your models.

See page to for playing theRadio.

See page to for playing theXM Satellite Radio.

See page to for playing aDisc.

121117

124

130

129

137

Only U.S. EX-L models

Audio SystemF

eatures

115

AM/FM/CD Audio System(LX models)

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System

(EX models)On U.S. models On U.S. models

(EX models)

(EX-L models)

(EX-L models)On Canadian models On Canadian models

Page 118: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Audio System

116

On U.S. models(EX-L models)

(EX-L models)On Canadian models

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio Systemwith rear entertainment system

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System with navigation system

(EX-L models)

(EX-L models)

Page 119: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Playing the RadioF

eatures

117

PRESET BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE/MODE KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

EX and EX-L models

LX models

EX-L models with rear entertainment system

PRESET BUTTONS

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

AM BUTTONFM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTONSEEKBUTTONS

AM BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

Canadianmodels

U.S. EX-Lmodels

AM/FMBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SOUND KNOB

FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

SEEKBUTTONS

EX andCanadianEX-L models

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE KNOBU.S. models

Page 120: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- +

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob or theAM/FM button. (AM or FM buttonon U.S. EX model and Canadianmodel).Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button). On theFM band, ST will be displayed if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio station on the selectedband: , , , thepreset buttons, and

Use the TUNE knob to

tune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 5 seconds. When it plays astation you want to listen to, pressthe SCAN button again.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the /( ) or /( )side of the bar, then release it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Play the Radio Preset

TUNE SEEK SCANAUTO SELECT.

To Select a Station

TUNE

SCAN

SEEK

Playing the Radio

118

Page 121: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- -

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the MODE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. Thesystem will automatically return thedisplay to the selected audio modeabout five seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

, press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

Press the MODE (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the Bass (BAS),Treble (TRE), Fader (FAD), andBalance (BAL) settings.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find stations, thenstore them in the preset buttons asdescribed previously.

76

To turn off auto selectAUTO SELECT

Audio System Lighting

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Adjusting the Sound

Playing the RadioF

eatures

119

Page 122: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-In addition to the knobs, buttons, andbars on the radio control panel, youcan operate some of the radiocontrols on the navigation systemscreen.

To adjust the sound, push theAUDIO button, then enter the soundgrid by touching the SOUND icon onthe display.

While you are listening to the radio,you can change to another band bypressing the AUDIO button next tothe navigation system screen, andthen touching the desired band icon(FM1, FM2, or AM).

AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUNDare adjustable from the navigationscreen. For an explanation of thesefunctions, see pages and .

Touch the A.SEL icon to activate the auto selectfunction. You will see A.SEL flashingthe display.

Touch the SCAN icon toactivate the scan function. You willsee SCAN in the display. Touch theicon again to deactivate it.

118 119

On vehicles with navigation system

Operating the Radio on theNavigation System Screen

AUTO SELECT

SCAN

Adjusting the Sound

Playing the Radio

120

AUDIO BUTTON

Page 123: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-+ -

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjusts the front-to-back strength.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjustthe front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

To see the audio display when youare finished adjusting the sound,wait 5 seconds.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on each sideof the treble or bass adjustment bar.The adjustment bar shows you thecurrent setting.

76

Audio System LightingLeft/Right Balance and Front/Rear Fader

Treble/Bass

Playing the RadioF

eatures

121

Page 124: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Radio Reception

122

Page 125: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio ReceptionF

eatures

123

Page 126: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

124

PWR/VOLKNOB

U.S. EX-L models

XM RADIO BUTTON DISP/MODE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

U.S. EX-L models with rear entertainment system

TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

XM RADIO BUTTON DISP/MODE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

Page 127: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.The navigation system screen alsoshows all XM information when theAUDIO button is pressed.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:Channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio

system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob. The last channelyou listened to will show in thedisplay.You can also change to the XM radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, CD, etc., bytouching the XM1 or XM2 icon onthe audio display (navigation systemscreen).

CONTINUED

U.S. EX and EX-L models only

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Operating the XM Radio

MODE

Features

125

On vehicles with navigation system

Page 128: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

--

+-

Pick a preset number (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the bar (icon) until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

To store a channel:

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

In the category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In the channel mode, all channelscan be selected.

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar ( or ) to select anothercategory.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN/RPT button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay. The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for a fewseconds, then selects the nextchannel. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the button or touch the iconagain.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons or preset icons on the audiodisplay. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel. Once a channel is stored, press and

release the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

SCAN

PresetTUNE

126

Page 129: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

Features

127

Page 130: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

128

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Page 131: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM satellite radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM RADIObutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service

Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures

129

Page 132: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Playing a Disc

130

PWR/VOL KNOB

REPEAT INDICATOR

CD SLOT

CD EJECTBUTTONCD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR RANDOM INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

CD EJECTBUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTONLX models

EX and EX-L models EX-L models with rear entertainment system

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOADBUTTON

CDBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CD EJECTBUTTONCD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

LOADBUTTON

CDBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONSSKIP BAR SKIP BAR

Page 133: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON(II) position.

You operate the CD player/CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To select the CDplayer/CD changer, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

Insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way to play it. When the systemreaches the end of the disc, it willreturn to the beginning and play thedisc again.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the AUX/XM or XMbutton.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button(AM or FM button). Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Onmodels with navigation system,touch the appropriate disc icon. Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence.

On models with Satellite RadioLX models

Playing a Disc, Disc Changer

To Play a CD

Features

131

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

Page 134: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-+

+-

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

Insert the CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

On the upper left side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinking,and the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again inthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

Each time you press andrelease /( ), the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release /( )to skip backward to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the /( ) or /( ). You will see CUE or REW inthe display.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press the RPT button againto turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. This continues until youpress the RDM button again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Except for LX model

Loading CDs in the In-dash CDChanger

SKIP

REPEAT

RANDOM

Playing a Disc, Disc Changer

132

Page 135: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

On vehicles with navigation systemOn vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles with navigation system

On LX modelsWhen you press the RDM button ortouch the TRACK RANDOM icon onthe screen, the system plays thetracks of the current disc in randomorder. You will see RDM (TRACKRANDOM) in the display. To turnthis feature off, press the RDMbutton (touch TRACK RANDOM)again.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a CD is playing.Press the CD button to play the CD.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the CD will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

When you press and release the RPTbutton or touch the TRACKREPEAT icon on the screen, thesystem continuously replays thecurrent track. As a reminder, youwill see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) inthe display. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button, or touch theTRACK REPEAT icon again.

When you press and hold the RPTbutton until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)is in the display, or when you touchthe DISC REPEAT icon on thescreen, the system continuouslyreplays the current disc. As areminder, you will see D-RPT in thedisplay.

Playing a Disc, Disc Changer

Random Play within a Disc To Stop Playing a CDTrack Repeat

Disc Repeat

Features

133

Page 136: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- +

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject ( ) button. Whena disc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the system beeps.

Load the desired CDs into themagazine, and load the magazineinto the changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The CD and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different CD, use the preset 5(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )button. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot.

Except for LX model Optional on LX models

Playing a Disc, Disc Changer

Removing CDs from the In-dashCD Changer

Operating the Optional CDChanger

134

Page 137: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the CD changer.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDsF

eatures

135

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

Page 138: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Error Message Cause Solution

CauseError Message Solution

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error,or a DVD hasbeen loaded in theCD player

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check the CD for damage or deformation. Ifthe CD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the CD isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error,or a DVD hasbeen loaded in theCD player

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.Check the CD for damage or deformation. Ifthe CD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the CD isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

LX models

EX and EX-L models

Disc Player Error Messages

136

Page 139: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message, and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Insert a CD.

Press the magazine EJECT button and pull itout. Check for an error message and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.This message should disappear when thetemperature returns to normal.Insert the CD magazine.

Optional on LX models

Disc Changer Error MessagesF

eatures

137

Page 140: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you are playing a CD

If you are listening to the radio

, use the CHbutton to skip to the beginning of thenext track. You will see the CD andtrack number in the display.

, use theCH button to go to the next presetstation. You will see the number ofthe preset button in the display. Tochange bands, press the AM/FMbutton.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The middle button adjusts thevolume. Press the top or bottom ofthe button and hold it until thedesired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes theaudio mode between FM1, FM2, AM,XM, CD, and DVD/AUX (if a disc isinserted).

The CH button has three functions,depending on whether you arelistening to the radio, or playing aCD.

Remote Audio Controls

138

CH BUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

MODEBUTTON

Page 141: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five-digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost when thepower was disconnected.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons (icons onvehicles with navigation system) toenter the code. The code is on theradio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

On EX and EX-L models

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

139

Page 142: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Setting the Clock

140

CLOCK

H BUTTON

M BUTTON

CLOCK CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON RESET BUTTON

M BUTTON

SET BUTTON

LX models

EX and EX-L models

Page 143: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

Press and hold the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button. Change the hours bypressing the H (preset 4) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. Change the minutes bypressing the M (preset 5) buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time. When you are finished,release the CLOCK button.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing andholding the clock button, thenpressing the RESET (preset 6)button sets the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The display shows the time when theignition is in the ACCESSORY (I) orthe ON (II) position.Press and hold the SET (TUNE)button until the numbers flash.Change the hours by pressing theH ( ) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M ( )button until the numbers advance tothe desired time. When you arefinished, press the SET button again.

Refer to the Navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

On models with Navigation System

EX and EX-L models

LX models

Setting the ClockF

eatures

141

Page 144: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Rear Entertainment System

142

PAUSEBUTTON

REAR POWERBUTTON

REAR CONTROL OFF ICON

REAR SPEAKER OFF ICON

DVD/AUX BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

EX-L models

RANDOMBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

REAR CTRL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

REAR ICON

Page 145: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle is equipped with a rearentertainment system that includes aDVD player for the enjoyment of therear passengers.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (AM/FMradio, XM radio, CD changer, orDVD player) than the front seatoccupants. The audio is broadcastthrough the supplied wirelessheadphones.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position to operate the rearentertainment system.

Press the REAR PWR button. Toturn on the rear controls (ceilingpanel/remote control), press the RRCTRL knob. The system’s iconshows in the upper display. Yourpassengers can then operate the rearsystem with the control panel in theceiling. The rear control panel can beused as a remote control when it isdetached from the ceiling unit. Pressthe RR CTRL knob again to turn therear controls off. You will see theRear Controls Off icon in the upperdisplay.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off if the rear system selectsa different entertainment sourcethan the front system. You will seethe Rear Speakers Off icon in theupper display. The sound for the rearsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in thedisplay. You must select anothersource.

To Turn On the System Rear Speakers

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

143

NOTE:

Page 146: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, turn theRR CTRL knob clockwise. Theamber RR LED comes on to showthat the control panel is enabled.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can play DVDvideo discs and CDs. It featuresDolby noise reduction.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To play the radio, the buttons for thefront entertainment system have thesame functions.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, select CD/CHG. If the CD is loaded in thelower player, select DVD/AUX.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel

Rear Entertainment System

144

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN BUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

Page 147: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.The amber Rear LED comes on toshow that the control panel is nowenabled.

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CDplayer below the front panel.

Push the DVD in halfway, the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.

Press the PLAY button ifthe DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Press the PAUSE buttonto pause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

CONTINUED

PLAY

PAUSE

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

145

EJECTBUTTON

PLAY BUTTON PAUSEBUTTON

REAR CTRL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

Page 148: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

--+

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

Press and hold thebutton to move forward; you will

see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press andhold the button to movebackward; you will see ‘‘REV’’ in thedisplay. Release the button when thesystem reaches the point you want.

Each time you press and release thebutton of the SEEK/SKIP, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track orchapter. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track orchapter.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the REARCTRL knob counterclockwise.

To turn on the rear entertainmentsystem from the rear control panel,press the PWR button. Use the AM/FM button, XM RADIO button (U.S.models), CD button, DVD/AUXbutton (U.S. models), or AUX button(Canadian models) to select theentertainment source. The selectedsource will be shown in the display.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the REARCTRL knob on the front panel.

Rear Entertainment System

EJECTSEEK/SKIP

To Return to Front AudioControls

Using the Rear Control Panel

146

Page 149: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲▼

Use the and buttons to select astation from the radio preset buttons.Press the button to search upthe channels in the channel mode.The system will search up thechannels within the category whenthe radio is in the category mode.Press the button to searchdown the channels in the channelmode. The system will search downthe channels within the category

when the radio is in the categorymode.

Use the and buttons to select astation from the radio preset buttons.Press the button to tune the radioto a higher frequency, or press thebutton to tune to a lower frequency.Pressing the or buttoncauses the system to search up ordown the band for a station with astrong signal. You will see SEEK inthe display.

CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment System

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

To Play the XM Radio from theRear Control Panel

Features

147

Page 150: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▲ ▼

Press the or button toselect another category.

Pressing and holding the DISPbutton for more than 5 seconds willchange the search mode betweenChannel Search and CategorySearch. Each time you press andrelease the DISP button, the displayabove the rear control panel changesin the following sequence: ChannelNumber, Category Name, MusicName, Artist Name, Channel Name,and back to Channel Number.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,select them by pressing the CDbutton. If a CD is loaded in the DVDplayer, press the DVD/AUX button.Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or button.The system will continue to movethrough the track. Press the

button to move forward, or thebutton to move backward.

Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changerand the overhead screen is not open,pressing the or button changesthe discs.

Rear Entertainment System

To Play a CD from the RearControl Panel

148

Page 151: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Press the button when youwant to pause the DVD. Press thisbutton again to go back to PLAY.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.

To move rapidly within a chapter,press and hold the or

button. The system willcontinue to move through the

chapter. Press the button tomove forward, or the button tomove backward. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.To select the menu on the DVD,press the MENU/SCROLL button(U.S. models) or MENU button(Canadian models). Use the ,

, , and buttons tomove to the desired menu selection,then press the ENT button to enteryour selection.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

149

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPENBUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

Page 152: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When you press the DISP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the title,chapter, elapsed time, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 1).

When you press the DISP buttonagain, the subtitle, audio, angle,sound characteristics, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 2).

To go back to play, press the DISPbutton.

DISP Button

Rear Entertainment System

150

Page 153: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When you press the SETUP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’ssetup menu is displayed at thebottom of the screen. You can thenchange various settings of play mode,personal surround, and display. Togo back to play without changing anysetting, press the RETURN orSETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ bypressing the or button, theplay mode setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘Play Mode’’ icon.

When you press the MENU buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’smain menu is displayed. To go backto play, press the MENU buttonagain.

CONTINUED

MENU Button System Messages Play Mode

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

151

Page 154: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Top Menu Audio

When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’using the or button, the DVD’stitle menu is displayed. This menu isalso displayed when you press theMENU button while a DVD is notplaying.

When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from theplay mode setup menu by pressingthe or button, you will see asubmenu of the dubbed language.

The selectable languages vary fromDVD to DVD, and this feature maynot be available on some DVDs.

Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

Select the desired language bypressing the or button. Thesound characteristics (Dolby Digital,LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recordedwith the selected language are alsodisplayed next to the language.

To go back to play, press the returnbutton.

Rear Entertainment System

152

Page 155: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

▼▲ ▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Subtitle Angle

To turn the subtitle on and off, select‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu bypressing the or button. You willsee submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the or

button.

If more than one subtitle language isavailable, you will see the languagecurrently selected when you select‘‘ON’’ in the previous step.Select the desired subtitle languageby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

On some DVDs, the scenes arerecorded by more than one camera,giving different viewpoints of thesame scene. To change the angle,select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.You will see a submenu if there aredifferent angles available.Select the number on the submenuby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu. CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

153

Page 156: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼▲

Search

When you select the ‘‘Search’’ fromthe play mode setup menu, you willsee the submenu shown above. Inthe left submenu, you can selectbetween ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ Theright submenu displays the currenttitle or chapter number and the totalnumber of titles or chapters.

To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ bypressing the or button. Changethe number on the right submenu bypressing the or button, andpress the ENT button to begin thetitle search. If you press theRETURN button, the display returnsto the play mode setup menu withoutdoing the search.

To do a chapter search, select‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the orbutton. Change the number on theright submenu by pressing the or

button, and press the ENT buttonto begin the chapter search. If youpress the RETURN button, thedisplay returns to the play modesetup menu without doing the search.

Rear Entertainment System

154

Page 157: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Num Input

A numerical command can be issuedto a DVD by inputting a two digitnumber, and a button number can beselected on the screen.

Select and enter the second digitnumber the same way. The cursorwill automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’icon when you press the ENT button.Press the ENT button to enter thenumber command. To go back to theDVD screen, press the RETURNbutton.

Select the first digit number usingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. If you want tochange the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’and press the ENT button, thenselect and enter the new number.

Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the playmode setup menu. The screen willchange as shown above. If you selectthe ‘‘Move Key’’ using the ,

, , or button, andpress the ENT button, the NumInput display on the screen will

change from the left side to rightside or right to left.

CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

155

Page 158: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

When you select ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ by pressing the

or button, the personalsurround setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ icon.

Selecting one of the sound effects,Cinema, Music, or Voice, from thepersonal surround menu allows youto change the sound in yourheadphones to match the disc you

are playing.

Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’by pressing the or button, andenter your selection by pressing theENT button. The ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ logo is displayed inthe upper right corner of the screen.

If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logodisappears, and there will be nospecial sound effect.

You can adjust these displaysettings:

Back LightContrastBrightnessTintColor

To adjust the display, select‘‘Display’’ by pressing the or

button, and enter yourselection by pressing the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Personal Surround Display

Rear Entertainment System

156

Page 159: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲▼ ▲

Select the quality you want to adjustby pressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button. Theadjustment bar is displayed next tothe selected item. Adjust the settingby pressing the or button.When you are finished with youradjustment, press the ENT button.

If you want to set the display to thedefault setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ bypressing the or button, and,then pressing the ENT button.

The display changes as shown above.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTbutton. You will see the message‘‘Default display settings applied’’ onthe display for 5 seconds.

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

157

Page 160: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Screen ModeYou can set the screen mode tothese settings:

NormalWideZoomFull

Rear Entertainment System

158

Normal Wide

Zoom Full

Page 161: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressingthe or button, then pressthe ENT button.

The selectable setting menu isdisplayed, and the current setting ishighlighted in blue.

Select the desired setting bypressing the or button, thenpress the ENT button.

The selected setting will behighlighted in blue for one second,and the screen returns to the playmode in the selected setting.

CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

159

Page 162: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

When you press the SETUP buttonon the rear control panel when aDVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIALSETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.

When you select ‘‘Language’’ withthe or button, the menushown above appears.

To return to the stop or prestopscreen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the

or button, and then pressthe ENT, or the SETUP button.

To select the language used in theDISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ bypressing the or button. You willsee the submenu next to ‘‘MenuLang.’’

There are two selectable menus:‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’

Menu LanguageINITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)

Rear Entertainment System

160

Page 163: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲Select the desired language bypressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button.

The selectable languages are,English, French, Spanish, German,Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.

If you want another language thanthose listed, you need to enter thecode number of the desired language.Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown in the next column.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’menu.

CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

161

Page 164: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

Audio Language

You can select the dubbed languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the

or button. You will see thesubmenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

If you made a mistake entering anumber, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the displaywith the , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton on the control panel. Thenselect and enter the correct numberas described. The display returns tothe initial ‘‘Language’’ menu screen.

If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the displaychanges to the language code inputmode. Select the first number usingthe , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton to enter it. Repeat this until allfour numbers are entered. When thefourth number is entered, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel to enter the newlanguage code.

Rear Entertainment System

162

Page 165: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

Subtitle Language

You can select the subtitle languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’

When you select ‘‘Others’’ at thebottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’screen, the above menu appears onthe screen.

Dynamic Range

‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces thedifferences between the loud andquiet sound levels throughout thedisc. When this is on, the loudersounds are lowered, and quietersounds are increased.

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

CONTINUED

INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

163

Page 166: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲ ▼ ▲When you select the ‘‘DynamicRange’’ by pressing the orbutton, you will see the submenunext to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ asshown above.

To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe or button, and thenpress the ENT button.

Angle Mark

When you switch to another anglewhile playing a DVD, the angle markis displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

You can set the system to display ornot display this angle mark.

Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing theor button. The above submenu

appears. If you want the angle markto be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the

or button, and then pressthe ENT button. The display returnsto the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Rear Entertainment System

164

ANGLE MARK

Page 167: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

Parental Control Level

You can place an auditory restrictionby changing the parental controllevel. The higher the level number,the lower the restriction.

Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu shown above. If you select‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, thedisplay returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’the display changes as shown above.To change the level, you need toenter your four digit password.Select the number for the first digitby pressing the , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel. CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

165

Page 168: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat theparental control level steps until youenter the correct password.

If you enter the password correctly,you can then change the parentalcontrol level.

Once you correctly enter thepassword, press the or buttonto change the level, and then pressthe ENT button to enter yourselection.

Changing the Password

The password was set to ‘‘1111’’when the vehicle left the factory.

Rear Entertainment System

166

Page 169: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To change the password, select‘‘Password.’’ You will see the abovemenu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe ‘‘Others’’ menu.

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat thepassword setting steps until youenter the correct password.

Select the first number by pressingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour number are entered. When youenter the fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

CONTINUED

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

167

Page 170: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▲If you forget the password, select‘‘Password,’’ and press the button10 times.

The display changes as shown above.If you want to use the defaultpassword (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ andpress the ENT button.

The message ‘‘Default passwordsetting applied’’ is displayed for5 seconds.

Rear Entertainment System

168

Page 171: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to operate the rearentertainment system, have yourdealer replace the batteries as soonas possible.

The rear control panel can bedetached from the ceiling unit andused as a remote control. To removeit from the ceiling unit, press therelease button. The control panel willswing down partway. Pivot it downfurther past the detent until itdetaches from the hinge. To reinstallit, reverse the procedure.

Battery type: BR3032

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote Control Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

169

COVER

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 172: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .135

Playable DVDs Protecting DVDs

Rear Entertainment System

170

Page 173: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you see an error message in thescreen while operating the DVDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear themessage, take your vehicle to adealer.

Message Solution

ERROR F0ERROR F2Invalid region codeInvalid disc

Parental control active.Change level to view.

Eject the disc and reinsert it.

Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disccompatible with this system.Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (seepages 165 and 166 ).

DVD Player Error Messages

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

171

Page 174: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward, and pivot it out ofthe way.

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. The antennasare in the front of the earpieces. Ifyou wear the headphones backwards,the antennas will be aimed awayfrom the system, affecting the soundquality and range.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward, and theheadphones turn off. When not inuse, store the headphones in thepocket of either front seat.

Replacing BatteriesWireless Headphones

Rear Entertainment System

172

VOLUMEDIAL TAB

Page 175: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are on theback of the center consolecompartment.

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpiece as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.

Auxiliary Input Jacks

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

173

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSBATTERY

COVERHEADPHONE CONNECTORS

VOLUMEDIALS

Page 176: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then the system resets. Toreset an alarm system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s front door with the key orthe remote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door without using thekey or the remote transmitter, or thehood, will cause it to alarm. It alsoalarms if the radio is removed fromthe dashboard or the wiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, the tailgate, or any door isnot fully closed. If the system will notset, check the Door and TailgateOpen Monitor on the instrumentpanel (see page ) to see if thedoors and the tailgate are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

66

On EX and EX-L models

Security System

174

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 177: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The indicator on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Push in the cruise control masterbutton. The indicator on theinstrument panel will come on.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

1.

2.

3.

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise ControlF

eatures

175

RESUME/ACCEL

CANCEL

SET/DECEL

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 178: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, and press the SET/DECELbutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.Push the cruise control masterbutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap on the brake pedal, the systemwill remember the previously setcruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the cruise control masterbutton turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Changing the Set Speed Canceling Cruise Control

Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

176

Page 179: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The direction and center positionicons come on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. The system then begins tocheck the vehicle direction andilluminates the appropriate icon(s).

The compass can be affected bydriving near power lines or stations,across bridges, through tunnels,over railroad crossings, past largevehicles, or driving near largeobjects that cause magneticinterference. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

Your vehicle has a compass in therear view mirror. The compassindicates the vehicle direction withilluminated letters; N (north), S(south), W (west), and E (east). Thecenter blue icon in the compass isalways on. It serves as a referencepoint.

To turn the compass on or off, pressthe compass button on the back ofthe rear view mirror.

The compass mirror has a lightsensor behind the right side of therear view mirror. Make sure theextended sun visor or an accessory isnot covering the sensor.

If equippedCompass Function

CompassF

eatures

177

COMPASSBUTTON

CENTER ICON

REAR VIEW MIRROR

Page 180: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to continually showthe wrong direction, do this.

Drive the vehicle slowly in circlesat less than 5 mph (8 km/h) untilthe center icon turns blue. Thisicon also turns blue by continuingto drive the vehicle under normaldriving conditions. When you seean actual heading on the compass,calibration is completed.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Find the zone for your area on thezone map (see page ). Eachzone number (1 through 15)corresponds to a compass zone onthe table (see page ).

Press and hold the compassbutton for about 3 seconds. Whenall of the direction icons begins toblink, release the button.

The blue direction icon(s) blinkand show the current zone.

If the zone is incorrect, press andrelease the compass buttonrepeatedly to get to the correctnumber.

The compass will return to thenormal display about 4 secondsafter you stop adjusting a zonenumber.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

With the blue center icondisplayed, press and hold thecompass button for about 6seconds. When the center iconturns red, release the button.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

5.

179

179

Compass Calibration

Compass Zone Selection

Compass

178

NOTE:

Page 181: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CompassF

eatures

179

Zone Map Compass Display for Each Zone

Page 182: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. They do not

have the safety feature that causesthe motor to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

1.

2.

If equipped

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General Information

Training HomeLink

Important Safety Precautions

Before you begin

180

Page 183: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.182

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

181

Page 184: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

182

TRAINING BUTTON

Page 185: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

1.

2.

180

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance

Features

183

Page 186: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

▼ ▲

When in reverse, the touch screenand Navi ‘‘hard’’ buttons are lockedout, except the ‘‘ZOOM’’ button.Touching the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ buttonallows you to adjust the brightness ofthe rear view camera image.

Since the rear view camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

Whenever you shift to R (reverse)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therear view camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens.

On EX-L models with navigation system

Rear View Camera and Monitor

184

The camera brightness cannot beadjusted by voice control.

Page 187: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 186.................Fuel Recommendation . 186

.........Service Station Procedures . 187....................................Refueling . 187

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 188

...................................Oil Check . 189.............Engine Coolant Check . 189

...............................Fuel Economy . 190...Accessories and Modifications . 191

.............................Carrying Cargo . 193

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

185

Page 188: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Premium fuel is recommended whentowing in certain conditions (seepage ).

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

220

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

186

Page 189: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Consult your dealer.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Put the attachment into the slit.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1.

2.

3.

4.5.

6.

277If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Before

Driving

187

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

SLIT

ATTACHMENT

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 190: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clip,and insert the end into the hole atthe center of the hood or the holeon the left side of the hood.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.3.2.

1.

Service Station Procedures

Opening the Hood To Close the Hood

188

LATCH SUPPORT RODCLIP

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Page 191: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back into itstube.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

242

234

239

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Adding Engine Oil

Before

Driving

189

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARKMAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

DIPSTICK

Page 192: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

234

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

190

Page 193: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

192

283Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

191

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 194: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Seeon page .37

Modifying Your Vehicle

Additional SafetyPrecautions

Accessories and Modifications

192

Page 195: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Front door and seat-back pockets

Rear cargo area, including thesecond and third row seats whenfolded flat

Console compartment

Rear compartment

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

193

GLOVE BOX

CARGO AREACONSOLE COMPARTMENT

DOOR POCKETS

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

REAR COMPARTMENT

Page 196: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- ×

Steps for determining correct loadlimit:The maximum load for your vehicle

is 1,158 lbs (525 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,158lbs (525 kg)’’ on your vehicle’splacard (on the driver’s doorjamb).

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,158 pounds or 525 kg kilograms.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the maximum loadis 1,158 lbs and there will be five150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 408 lbs.(1,158 750 (5 150) = 408 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedin the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

1.

2.

5.

6.

3.

4.

213

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

194

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 197: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used overthe cargo area behind the third rowseats. When the third row seats arefolded down, the cargo cover can beinstalled in a forward position andextended over the larger cargo area.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

57

Carrying Cargo

Optional Separation Net

Optional Cargo Cover

Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Before

Driving

195

Page 198: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The hooks on each side of thetailgate and on the underside of thecargo area storage compartment lidare for plastic grocery bags. To usethe hook on the storagecompartment lid, open the lid, andattach the cord to one of the shaftsof the third seat center headrestraint.

You can use the cargo net to secureitems in the cargo area, and storesmall items between the two halvesof the net. To install the cargo net,hooks on the four corners of the netto the tabs at both sides of the cargofloor.

If equipped

Carrying Cargo

Cargo Net

196

Page 199: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 system (4WDmodels only), the VSA system, thetire pressure monitoring system, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 198.......................Starting the Engine . 199

..............Automatic Transmission . 200..............................VTM-4 System . 204

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 205

..................................Parking Tips . 207.............................Braking System . 208

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 209Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 211.........................VSA Off Switch . 212

...........................Towing a Trailer . 213......................Trailer Driving Tips . 220

Off-Highway Driving..................................Guidelines . 223

DrivingD

riving

197

Page 200: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle has a higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

15

92

61

78

87

258

See page for additional driving off-highway guidelines.

223

Driving Guidelines

Preparing to Drive

198

Page 201: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

79

Starting the EngineD

riving

199

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

Page 202: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

To shift from any position, pull thelever toward you. You cannot shiftout of Park when the ignition switchis in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

200

SHIFT LEVER

Page 203: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpull the shift lever towardsyou.

Pull the shift lever towardsyou.

Move the shift lever.

3

3

3

3

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and pull the shift lever towardsyou to shift from Park to reverse. Toshift from reverse to neutral, cometo a complete stop and then shift.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

203

CONTINUED

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

201

Page 204: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

This position locks thetransmission in first gear. Byupshifting and downshifting through1, 2, D , and D, you can operate thetransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

3

33

Drive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter3

Automatic Transmission

202

Page 205: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pulling the shift lever does notshift the transmission out of Park:

Set the parking brake.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards youand move it out of Park to neutral.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover next to theshift lever. Use a small flat-tippedscrewdriver or finger nail file toremove the cover. Carefully pryoff the edge of the cover.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then install thecover. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

3.

4.

5.

6.1.

2.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

203

Page 206: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The vehicle must be stopped withthe engine running.

doany of the following:

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.

Move the shift lever to D or D .Move the shift lever to first (1),second (2), or reverse (R) gear.Press the VTM-4 lock button. Theindicator in the button comes on.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

The variable torque management4WD (VTM-4) system automaticallytransfers varying amounts of enginetorque to the rear wheels underlower traction conditions.

If more traction is needed when yourvehicle is stuck, or is likely tobecome stuck, you can use theVTM-4 lock button to increasetorque to the rear wheels.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

The VTM-4 lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It willautomatically engage again as thespeed slows below 18 mph (30km/h). The indicator in the buttonwill remain on.

1.

2.

3.3

4WD models only To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,

VTM-4 System

204

Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

Do not continually spin the f ront tiresof your vehicle. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

Page 207: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator and theappropriate tire on the tire pressuremonitor to come on.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified in the vehicleplacard and this owner’s manual (seepage ).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning indicator is on, oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the properpressure as indicated on the vehicle’stire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability. If the tire is flat, or if the tire

pressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

289

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Driving

205

Page 208: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The appropriate tire indicator andlow tire pressure indicator comes onif a tire becomes significantlyunderinflated. See

on page .

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire, thelow tire pressure indicator stays on.This is normal; the system is notmonitoring the spare tire pressure.Manually check the spare tirepressure to be sure it is correct.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

266

205

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitor

Low TirePressure Indicator

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

206

Page 209: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is on anincline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on the driver’sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

On vehicles with security system

Parking Tips

Parking TipsD

riving

207

Page 210: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Braking System Design

Braking System

208

Page 211: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

209

Page 212: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down, and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

278

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS Indicator Important Safety Reminders

210

Page 213: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

212

CONTINUED

VSA Activation Indicator VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) SystemD

riving

211

Page 214: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the vehicle stabilityassist system on and off.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

258

266

VSA Off Switch

VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

212

Page 215: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle has been designed totow a trailer, as well as for carryingpassengers and their cargo.

To safely tow a trailer, you shouldobserve the load limits, use theproper equipment, and follow theguidelines in this section.

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

The maximumweight of the trailer and everythingin or on it depends on the number ofoccupants in your vehicle and thetype of trailer being towed (see page

).

Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance.

The weight that thetongue of a fully loaded trailer putson the hitch should be 5 to 10percent of the total trailer weight forboat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent oftotal trailer weight for all othertrailers. (See page for limits foryour towing situation). Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

223

215215

Load Limits

Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines

Towing a Trailer

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Driving

213

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Page 216: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo and the tongueload is 5,840 lbs (2,65 0 kg) for 2WD,

The maximumallowable weight on the vehicle axlesfor 2WD is 2,865 lbs (1,300kg)on thefront axle, and 3,085 lbs (1,400kg)onthe rear axle; for 4WD it is 2,865 lbs

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 9,700 lbs (4,410kg) with the proper hitch and fluidcoolers (see page ).

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page tomake sure you do not exceed thelimit for your conditions.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Measure from the ground to thebottom of the trailer hitch.

Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.

Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.

Subtract the second measurementfrom the first measurement, thenrefer to the following table.

If the difference is more than 3 ¾inch, you have too much load on thetongue. Redistribute the load orremove cargo as needed.

1 ½’’2 ¼’’

3’’3 ¾’’

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

217

215

Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR)

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

If thedifference is:

Estimatedtongue load is:

Towing a Trailer

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

To Estimate the Tongue Load

214

05/07/21 11:00:21 31S9V630 0219 

and 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg) for 4WD.

(1,300 kg) on the front axle, and 3,155 lbs (1430 kg) on the rear axle.

Page 217: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing is Not Recommended

Towing a TrailerD

riving

215

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:BOAT TRAILERS

OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7 kg)

of luggage in the cargo area.

4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)4,300 lbs (1,945 kg)4,100 lbs (1,855 kg)2,000 lbs (905 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)3,300 lbs (1,490 kg)3,100 lbs (1,400 kg)2,700 lbs (1,220 kg)1,200 lbs (540 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)350 lbs (160 kg)220 lbs (100 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

Page 218: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendant watches thescale.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg)

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit: 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg)

If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, you can calculate the reargross axle weight by subtractingthe weight in step 1 from theweight in step 2.Limit: 3,086 lbs (1,400 kg)

Check the gross combined weight.Limit: 9,700 lbs (4,410 kg)Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads

216

Page 219: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in Step 5 fromthe weight in step 6.Limit: See page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Your dealer offers a trailer packagethat includes a hitch, a ball mount, awiring harness, a heavy-dutytransmission fluid cooler, and aheavy-duty power steering fluidcooler.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state, federal, province,and local regulations.

We strongly recommend that youhave your dealer install a Hondahitch and use the required fluidcoolers. Using non-Honda equipmentmay result in serious damage to yourvehicle.

To help prevent overheating, aheavy-duty transmission fluid coolerand a heavy-duty power steeringfluid cooler are required for trailertowing. These coolers are availableonly from your dealer.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

6.

7.

215

215

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

Weight Distributing Hitch

Hitch

Towing a TrailerD

riving

217

Page 220: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Honda requires that any trailer witha total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more has its own brakes.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicles hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer manufacturer formore information on installingelectric brakes.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

267

258270

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Safety Chains

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

Spare Tires

218

Page 221: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check trailerlight requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow.

To get to your vehicle’s trailerlighting connector, open the tailgate,remove the cargo cover, thenremove the rear panel trim. Theconnector is on the left side.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install a Honda wiring harnessand converter. This harness hasbeen designed for your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the mating connector andpins that mate with the connector inyour vehicle from your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Trailer Lights

Towing a TrailerD

riving

219

GROUND(BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/WHITE)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

BATTERY POWER(YELLOW)

Page 222: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated.

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Towing performance can beaffected by high altitude, hightemperature, or when climbingsteep grades. Therefore, premiumfuel (premium unleaded gasolinewith pump octane number of 91 orhigher) is recommended whentowing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590kg).

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

186

Trailer Driving Tips

Break-In Period

Driving Safely With a Trailer

220

Page 223: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

3

3

Trailer Driving Tips

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Driving on Hills

Making Turns and BrakingRemember, it

takes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Driving

221

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.When towing a fixed-sided trailer(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

To prevent the transmission fromshifting frequently, drive in the Dposition.

Towing Speeds and Gears

Page 224: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

222

If the vehicle’s wheels slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

204

bottom

Retrieving a Boat

Parking

Backing Up

Trailer Driving Tips

Page 225: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance and four-wheel drive VTM-4 system allow youto occasionally travel on unpavedroads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trailblazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properly,and do not exceed your vehiclecargo load limits (see pages

and ).

Wherever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Be aware that a heavy load canreduce ground clearance and yourability to clear obstacles.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditionsallow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

194 213

Important Safety Precautions

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

223

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Page 226: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second (2) gear willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow or ice.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

224

Page 227: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4Lock (see page ). Carefully try togo in the direction (forward orreverse) that you think will get youunstuck. Do not spin the tires at highspeeds. It will not help you get outand may cause damage to thetransmission or VTM-4 system.

If you are still unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose.

Use a nylon strap to attach the Pilotto the recovery vehicle and carefullytake out the slack in the strap. Oncethe strap is tight, the recoveryvehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

Before driving through water, stop,get out if necessary, and make surethat:

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles, orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.Proceed without shifting or changingspeeds, and do not stop the vehicleor shut off the engine.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gently‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowlyuntil they operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

204

CONTINUED

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

225

Page 228: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may be able to safely tow alightweight trailer (such as amotorcycle or small tent trailer) off-road if you follow these guidelines.

Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45kg).

Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,and avoid driving in hilly terrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Towing a Trailer Off-Road

226

Page 229: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in theinformation display, a maintenancerecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 228....................Maintenance Minder . 229....................Maintenance Record . 236

..............................Fluid Locations . 238........................Adding Engine Oil . 239

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 240..............................Engine Coolant . 242

....................Windshield Washers . 243....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 244

..............................Differential Oil . 245....................................Timing Belt . 245....................................Brake Fluid . 246

....................Power Steering Fluid . 247.............................................Lights . 248

.....................................Floor Mats . 254.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 254

.................................Wiper Blades . 255...............................................Tires . 257

...................Checking the Battery . 262.............................Vehicle Storage . 263

303

MaintenanceM

aintenance

227

Page 230: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when working

with the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

228

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations, andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Page 231: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

------------

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items in theinformation display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the engine oil lifedisplay according to this table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe Select/Reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life displayappears (see page ).70

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

229

ENGINE OIL LIFEDISPLAY

SELECT/RESETKNOB

Page 232: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

235

Maintenance Minder

230

MAINTENANCEMINDERINDICATOR

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

Page 233: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill be blinking. The display comeson every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed byyour dealer as soon as possible.

The maximum total mileage shownis ‘‘ 9999.’’

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the Select/Reset knob.

When the engine oil life display is 0percent or negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicatorremains on even if you change theinformation display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described in the nextpage.

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will see anegative mileage. It is displayedwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing the 0 percentmessage. Afterward, it shows yourdriving distance if you continue todrive. Immediately have theindicated maintenance done by yourdealer.

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

231

Page 234: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

When the vehicle needsmaintenance, maintenance codesappear on the information display.

Press the Select/Reset knob untilthe engine oil life indicator isdisplayed.

For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .

Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 10 seconds. The engineoil life and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

1.

2.

3.

235

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

232

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

Page 235: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

4.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

233

Page 236: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

189

189

246

258

248

244

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

234

Page 237: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- -

Maintenance Minder

235

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission and transfer fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months afterthe display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluidevery 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

233

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

12

3

4

56

1

1

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles,replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailertowing results in higher transmission and transfer temperatures orfrequently fully loaded. This requires transmission and transferfluid changes more frequently than recommended by theMaintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle underthese conditions, have the transmission and transfer fluid changedevery 30,000 miles (48,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C),in very low temperatures (under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer,replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailertowing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluidor frequently fully loaded. This requires differential fluid changesmore frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder.If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have thedifferential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Symbol Symbol

Main

tenance

Min

der

Page 238: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Maintenance Record

236

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Page 239: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

237

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Page 240: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Fluid Locations

238

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)POWER STEERING

FLUID (Red cap)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Page 241: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap, and tighten it securely. Waita few minutes, and recheck the oillevel. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

239

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Page 242: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

1.

2.

Changing the Oil and FilterSynthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

240

DRAIN BOLTWASHER

Page 243: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to theengine block. A stuck gasket couldcause an oil leak.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

241

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Page 244: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-LifeAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 %antifreeze and 50 % water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

242

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 245: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The low washerlevel indicator will come on when thelevel is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

2.

3.

4.

5.1.

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield WashersM

aintenance

243

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Page 246: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission

244

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Page 247: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- -

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely. Tighteningtorque:

The differential should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Frequently tow a trailer.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

The timing belt should be replacedaccording to the maintenancemessage shown on the informationdisplay. Replaced the belt at 60,000miles (100,000 km) if you regularlydrive your vehicle in one or more ofthese conditions:

Check the fluid level with thedifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thedifferential fluid filler bolt andwasher, and carefully feel inside thebolt hole with your finger. The fluidlevel should be up to the edge of thebolt hole. If it is not, slowly addVTM-4 Differential Fluid until itstarts to run out of the hole.

6.4WD models only

Timing Belt

Differential Oil

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil, Timing BeltM

aintenance

245

FILLER BOLT

CORRECT LEVEL

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Page 248: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoir monthly.Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.

Brake Fluid

246

MAX

MIN

Page 249: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Power Steering FluidM

aintenance

247

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Page 250: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be performed byyour dealer or other qualifiedmechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. Handle a bulb by its steel base,and protect the glass from contactwith your skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Open the hood.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

248

NOTE:

TAB

BULB CONNECTOR

Halogen headlight bulbs getvery hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause the bulbto overheat and shatter.

Page 251: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To remove the front turn signalbulb, push it in slightly and turn itcounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb into thesocket and reinstall it.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove a bulb, pull it straightout of its socket.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn SignalBulb

Replacing a Parking Light/FrontSide Marker Light Bulbs

Maintenance

249

Page 252: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the left, and turn off the engine.If you are changing the bulb onthe passenger’s side, turn thesteering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the three holding clipsfrom the inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender.

Remove the socket from the turnsignal assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theturn signal assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the three holding clips.Lock each clip in place by pushingon the center.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb

250

Page 253: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If equipped

Use a wrench to remove themounting bolt from the underbody.

Pull the under cover away fromthe bumper.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into theassembly and turn it one-quarterturn clockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the fog lights to makesure the new bulb is working.

Reinstall the mounting bolt on theunder cover.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

6.

7.

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

Maintenance

251

Page 254: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Open the tailgate.

Remove the two screws, then pullthe rear light assembly straightback to remove it from the body.

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover. Remove thecovers by carefully prying on theedge with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the socket of the burnedout bulb by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise, and pull itstraight out of its socket.

Install a new bulb into the socket,and reinstall the socket into thelight assembly.

1.1.

2.

3.

2.4.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

252

Page 255: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw under the lens.

Place a cloth on the middle edgeof a part of the lens on thepassenger’s side. Remove a part ofthe lens by carefully prying on itsedge with a small flip tippedscrewdriver.

Reinstall the back-up light cover.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Pull the light assembly out of thetailgate.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push a new bulb into thesocket until it bottoms. Reinstallthe assembly.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

3.

Lights

Replacing the High-mount BrakeLight

Maintenance

253

SCREW

Page 256: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

The driver’s and right second rowfloor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals ormarking the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Floor Mats Cleaning Seat Belts

Floor Mats, Cleaning Seat Belts

254

LOOP

Page 257: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

1. 2. Front only:

CONTINUED

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

255

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

Page 258: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Front only:

Wiper Blades

256

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE BLADE

Page 259: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on the next page.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

205

Inflation Guidelines

TiresM

aintenance

257

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 260: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 4 to 6psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )higher than the cold readings. Thisis normal. Do not let air out to matchthe recommended cold air pressure.The tire will be underinflated.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .289

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection

Tires

258

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P235/70R16 104S 32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

Page 261: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires at these intervals:

Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

TiresM

aintenance

259

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheels weights f orbalancing.

Page 262: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Wheels:

Tires:

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size explanation.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

291

290

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

260

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P235/70R16 104S

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 263: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving condition or locallaws. Make sure they are the correctsize for your tires. Metal link-type‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Tire Chains

TiresM

aintenance

261

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Page 264: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

262

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Page 265: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

If possible periodically run theengine until it reaches normaloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Vehicle StorageM

aintenance

263

Page 266: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

264

Page 267: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 266....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 271................................Jump Starting . 272

..............If the Engine Overheats . 274.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276..........Charging System Indicator . 276

..................Malfunction Indicator . 277...............Brake System Indicator . 278

..............................................Fuses . 279..............................Fuse Locations . 283

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

265

Emergency Towing ....................... 278

Page 268: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on it.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ). Driving with thecompact spare tire may activatethe VSA system.

212

Compact Spare Tire

266

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Page 269: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

The tools and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover bypushing the top of it.

Turn the jack’s endcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack and tools.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

2.

1. 3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

267

SPARE TIRE

TOOLS

COVER

JACK

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Page 270: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover on thecargo area lining to access theshaft for the spare tire hoist.

Put the wheel nut wrench on thehoist shaft. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground. Keepturning the wheel nut wrench tocreate slack in the cable.

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. It is pointed to by amark molded into the underside ofthe body. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

8.

7.

6.5. 9.

Changing a Flat Tire

268

BRACKET JACKING POINTWHEEL NUT WRENCH

Page 271: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Place the flattire on the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and place the flat tire upunder the hoist.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

269

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Page 272: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

Slowly turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise to take up the slack ofthe hoist cable. Make sure thebracket is seated in the centerhole of the spare tire.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jacks’ end bracket to lock it inplace and replace the tools andcover.

Turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise until the flat tire restsagainst the underbody of thevehicle and you hear the hoistclick.

17.

18.

19.

20.

Changing a Flat Tire

270

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tire hoist, evenif you are not stowing a tire. If thehoist is lef t down, it will be damagedduring driving and need to be replaced.

Page 273: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound or series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

272

262

272

199

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Starting theEngine

The Starter Operates NormallyJump Starting

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

271

278

Page 274: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly (see page ).

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it. Put the transmission in neutral or

Park, and set the parking brake.

1.

2.

3.

64

279

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

272

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

278

Page 275: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

-Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

273

Page 276: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all the accessories, andturn on the hazard warning lights.

5.

6.

4.1.

2.

3.

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

274

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

on page 278 ).

Page 277: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Emergency

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

275

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Towing on page 278).

Page 278: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure light. If it does not go outwithin ten seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving.(See on page

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.This indicator should never

come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

1.

2.

3.

4.

189

239

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

276

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

278 ).

Page 279: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes are erased. It can takeseveral days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator could come onbecause of a loose or missing fuel fillcap. You will also see a ‘‘CHECKFUEL CAP’’ message on theinformation display. Tighten the capuntil it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator turn off immediately; itcan take several days of normaldriving.

If the indicator remains on or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have the vehicle checked by thedealer as soon as possible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emission controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance,continued operation may causeserious damage.

296

Malfunction Indicator

Readiness Codes

StateEmissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

277

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Page 280: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAindicator come on with the brakesystem indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your dealerimmediately.

design will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, and as a reminderto check the parking brake. It willstay on if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the fluid level is low, take thevehicle to your dealer and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).246

EmergencyTowing

278

U.S. Canada

Brake System Indicator Emergency Towing,

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuit

on page 278 ).

Emergency TowingIf your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Towing your vehicle with two tires onthe ground will damage parts of the4WD system. It should be transportedon a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

Page 281: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The vehicle’s fuses are located infour fuse boxes. The interior fuseboxes are located under thedashboard on the driver’s andpassenger’s side.

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing, FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

279

DRIVER’ S SIDE INTERIOR

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with all four wheels on theground, do the following:

With all four wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D for several seconds,then to N.Turn off the engine.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported with the all f our wheels of fthe ground.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

Fuses

Page 282: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

To open the passenger’s side, pullthe right edge of the cover.

The primary under-hood fuse box islocated on the passenger’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is next to thebattery.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. The diagram forthe interior driver’s side fuse box ison the kick panel below the fuse box.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

1.

2.

283 284

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

280

PASSENGER’ S SIDE INTERIOR

UNDER-HOODFUSEBOX

Page 283: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CONTINUED

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Remove the screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

3. 4. 5.

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

281

BLOWN

BLOWNFUSE PULLER

Page 284: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If a trailer light is burned out, checkif these fuses are blown when youreplace the light bulbs:

If those fuses are OK, but the trailerlights still do not work, there are twoblown 7.5 amp fuses in the trailerhitch wiring. To access the 7.5 ampfuses:

Open the tailgate and remove thecargo floor lid.Pull out the bottom of the tailgaterubber seal.Remove rear trim panel by pullingup on the inside edge of the reartrim panel, and unhooking the fourclips and tabs.After replacing fuses, and reinstallthe rear trim panel in the reverseorder of removal.

Primary under-hood fuse boxfuses 5, 7, and 24Interior driver’s side fuse box: 10Interior passenger’s side fuse box:10If the driver’s power window fuse is

removed, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Toreset the AUTO function, see page

.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

95

139

On EX and EX-L models

Trailer Fuses

Fuses

282

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

Page 285: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

No. Amps. No. Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

Amps.

Amps.

Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

123456789

10111213

20 A30 A20 A15 A15 A

20 A20 A20 A40 A40 A30 A40 A

1415161718192021222324

Rear A/CHeater MotorCooling FanSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCondenser FanMG ClutchIGI MainTrailer (accessory)

789

1011

ETCSIG CoilLAFTPMS(FR FOG)

30 A40 A30 A

7.5 A10 A15 A

120 A30 A

7.5 A50 A

15 A15 A15 A7.5 A

(20 A)

Spare FuseSpare FuseRight HeadlightACG SHazardNot usedStop, HornLeft HeadlightRadioPower Window MotorPower SeatRear DefrosterBack Up, ACC

AC INVERTERVSA F/S RelayVSA MotorVTM-4ACMRear Accessory Socket

123456

20 A40 A30 A20 A10 A15 A

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

283

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Page 286: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

* *

No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

123

456789

10111213

1234567

8

910111213141516

20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A20 A

20 A

15 A15 A10 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A20 A

15 A10 A7.5 A

7.5 A10 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A30 A

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower Mirror, ABSDaytime Running LightECU (PCM), Cruise ControlOPDS, Rear WiperACC RelayBack-up Lights, InstrumentLightsTurn SignalsVTM-4Front WiperNot used

Driver’s Power WindowDriver’s Power Seat RecliningHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat SlidingNot usedDaytime Running LightDriver’s side Rear PowerWindowFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory SocketSmall LightInterior LightPower Door LockBack UpMoonroofMoonroofPassenger’s Side Rear PowerWindow

Canadian models:

Canadian models

Fuse Locations

284

Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

FrontFront

:

Page 287: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 286................................Specifications . 288

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 290.................................Treadwear . 290

......................................Traction . 290.............................Temperature . 291.............................Tire Labeling . 291

.......................Emissions Controls . 293.....................The Clean Air Act . 293

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 293

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 293

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 293

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 294....................PGM-FI System . 294

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 294

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 294

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 294

....................Replacement Parts . 294..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 295

..............State Emissions Testing . 296....Testing of Readiness Codes . 296

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

285

Page 288: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

286

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Page 289: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

287

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Page 290: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- -

* *

Specifications

288

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Battery

Capacities

1.93 US gal (7.3 )2.43 US gal (9.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

20.34 US gal (77.0 )188.0 in (4,775 mm)76.5 in (1,943 mm)

ND-OIL824.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

HFC-134a (R-134a)

LengthWidth

Height

WheelbaseTrack 66.3 in (1,685 mm)

106.3 in (2,700 mm)

70.5 in (1,790 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)

Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steeringfluid cooler.The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

77.5 in (1,968 mm)

71.7 in (1,821 mm)70.1 in (1,780 mm)71.3 in (1,811 mm)

66.5 in (1,690 mm)66.5 in (1,690 mm)66.7 in (1,694 mm)

12 V 72 AH/20 HRCapacity

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine0.193 US gal (0.73 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

2.79 US qt (2.64 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

Automatictransmissionfluid

Reardifferentialfluid (4WD)Windshieldwasherreservoir

8.3 US qt (7.9 )

3.5 US qt (3.3 )

8.9 US qt (8.4 )

4.0 US qt (3.8 )

Approx.

1 :

2 :

1 :

2 :

FrontRear

4WD

2WD

LXEXLXEXLXEX

FrontRear

4WD

2WD

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChange

Total

Change

4WD2WD

4WD2WD

2 1

1

2

Page 291: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

--

--

-------------------

**

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

289

Lights

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Headlights

Front side marker lightsFront position lightsFront turn signal lightsSide turn signal lightsFront fog lightsRear side marker lightsRear turn signal/hazard lightsStop/TaillightsBackup lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightFront map lights

Rear map lightsCargo area lightVanity mirror lightDoor (Courtesy) light 3.8 W

21 W/5 W

5 W

55 W12 V12 V 60 W12 V

12 V

21 CP (18 W)3 CP21 CP (18 W)8 W4 CP5 W5 W

21 W3 CP55 W3 CP

12 V12 V 1.1 W12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V 21 W/5 W

5 W12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V

Interior

Under-hood

See page 284 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 284 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 283 or the fuse boxcover.

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

SKJ16DR-M11IZFR5K-11

10.0 : 1211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0°66’0°76’

1°98’

0°50’

1°88’0°50’

Size

Pressure

P235/70R16 104ST155/90D16 110M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,i-VTEC V6 gasoline engine (2WD)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,VTEC V6 gasoline engine (4WD)

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

FrontRearFrontRearFront

NGK:DENSO:

HighLow

(AMBER)

1 : EX-L model2 : LX and EX models

(H11)(HB3)

(2WD)(2WD)(2WD)

(4WD)(4WD)(4WD)

2

1

Page 292: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

290

Page 293: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

- -

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire width in millimeters.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. GradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance that all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

P

16

R

235

70

104

S

Temperature A, B, C

Tire Labeling

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling

Tire Size

TechnicalInform

ation

291

P235/70R16 104S

Page 294: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

--

-The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

Max Load

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like this example:

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Max PressTire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

Tire Labeling

292

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

Page 295: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.234

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

The Clean Air Act

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

293

Page 296: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The three way catalytic converter is

in the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Emissions Controls

294

Page 297: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

295

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERTHREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

Page 298: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

296

Page 299: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determinesthe readiness codes are still notset, see your dealer.

State Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

297

Page 300: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

298

Page 301: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Customer Service................................Information . 300

....................Warranty Coverages . 301Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 302.....................Authorized Manuals . 303

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

299

Page 302: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

U.S. Owners:Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

286

Customer Service Information

300

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

American Honda Motor Co.Honda Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7D1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7028

Page 303: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2006 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2006 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty CoveragesW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

301

Page 304: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

302

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

Page 305: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

*2006

HON

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S.only)

Authorized ManualsA

uthorizedM

anuals

303

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2005-2006 Honda Pilot Service Manual

2003-2006 Honda Pilot

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003-2006 Honda Pilot

Body Repair Manual

2006 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual

2006 Honda Pilot

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2006 Honda Pilot

Honda Service History

2006 Honda Pilot

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$75.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61S9V03

61S9V03EL

61S9V30

31S9V630

31S9V730

31S9VM10

31S9VQ30

HON-R

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

Page 306: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Body Repair Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Service Manual:

Authorized Manuals

304

NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name,and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should besent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 307: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CONTINUED

............................Capacities Chart . 288.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

.............................Carrying Cargo . 193..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..........................CD Changer . 131, 134.......................................CD Player . 130

...Accessories and Modifications . 191ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 81............Accessory Power Sockets . 101

...........................AC Power Outlet . 102....................Additives, Engine Oil . 239

...............Advanced Airbag System . 30.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 25

..........Airbag System Components . 25..............Air Conditioning System . 106

.....................Rear A/C Control . 113.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 258

......................................Antifreeze . 242...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 209

...............................Indicator . 63, 210...................................Operation . 209

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 139.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 81

................................Audio System . 115...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 76

.............Automatic Speed Control . 175..............Automatic Transmission . 200

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 288

...............Checking Fluid Level . 244.......................................Shifting . 200

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 200................Shift Lever Positions . 201

....................Shift Lock Release . 203

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 276............................Jump Starting . 272

..............................Maintenance . 262............................Specifications . 289

..............................Before Driving . 185..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21

...........................Beverage Holders . 99..................................Booster Seats . 54

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 209

.............Break-in, New Linings . 186....................Bulb Replacement . 252

...........................................Fluid . 246.........................................Parking . 97

.................System Indicator . 63, 278........................Wear Indicators . 209

.............................Braking System . 208.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 186

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 76........................Brights, Headlights . 75

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 252

.....................Brake Lights . 252, 253................Front Parking Lights . 249

........Front Side Marker Lights . 249.................................Headlights . 248

........High-mount Brake Lights . 253.................................Rear Bulbs . 252

............................Specifications . 289.............Turn Signal Light . 249, 252

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 248

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

Page 308: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

........................Certification Label . 286............................................Chains . 261

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267Change Oil

........................................How to . 240......................................When to . 229

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 276............Checklist, Before Driving . 198

..................Childproof Door Locks . 83Child Seats

.........................................LATCH . 47..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

...............Climate Control System . 112.........................Clock, Setting the . 140

.....................Code, Audio System . 139........................CO in the Exhaust . 293

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 199......................Compact Spare Tire . 266

...................Console Compartment . 99

.................Consumer Information . 300.............Controls, Instruments and . 59

Coolant........................................Adding . 242

....................................Checking . 189.........................Proper Solution . 242

...................Temperature Gauge . 71

...................Conversation Mirror . 100Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 293............Cruise Control Operation . 175

....Customer Service Information . 300

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 60

................Daytime Running Lights . 76Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 67.................................Dead Battery . 272

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 302................Defogger, Rear Window . 77......Defrosting the Windows . 108, 110

....................................Dimensions . 288...............Dimming the Headlights . 75

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 244

..................................Engine Oil . 189....................Directional Signals . 66, 75

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 210.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 241

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 82..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 197

....................................Economy . 190...................................DVD Player . 142

........DVD Player Error Message . 171

..............................Economy, Fuel . 190............Emergencies on the Road . 265.............Battery, Jump Starting . 272...........Brake System Indicator . 278

................Changing a Flat Tire . 267.....Charging System Indicator . 276

..................Checking the Fuses . 279.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 277

..................Overheated Engine . 274...........................Emergency Brake . 97

......................Emergency Flashers . 77

.......................Emissions Controls . 293.............Emissions Testing, State . 296

Index

D

E

II

Emergency Towing ....................... 278

Page 309: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CONTINUED

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 71

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 277

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 276

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 239...............................Overheating . 274

............................Specifications . 289

............................Speed Limiter . 202.......................................Starting . 199

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 293...............................Exhaust Fumes . 57

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 294

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 19

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 190.........................................Gasoline . 186

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 67...........................................Gauge . 70

................Octane Requirement . 186........................Tank, Filling the . 187

................Gas Station Procedures . 187

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 71

...............................................Fuel . 70GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 214GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

.......................................Rating) . 214............Gearshift Lever Positions . 200

........................................Glove Box . 99GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 214

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 248.................Hazard Warning Button . 77

...................................Fan, Interior . 106.........................................Features . 105

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 187Filters

...............................................Oil . 240.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 77

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 267

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 244

..........................................Brake . 246..........................Power Steering . 247

................Windshield Washers . 243...................Folding the Third Seat . 89

..........................Four-way Flashers . 77.................................................Fuel . 186

...............................Cap Message . 72......................Fill Door and Cap . 187

...........................................Gauge . 70................Octane Requirement . 186

........................Reserve Indicator . 67........................Tank, Filling the . 187

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 279

Index

FG

H

IND

EX

III

Page 310: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

........................................Headlights . 75........................................Aiming . 248

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 76............Daytime Running Lights . 76

..................High Beam Indicator . 67...........High Beams, Turning on . 75............Low Beams, Turning on . 75

.........................Reminder Chime . 76........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 248

...................................Turning on . 75...................................Headphones . 172

..............................Head Restraints . 91.................................Heated Mirror . 93

.....................................Heater, Seat . 86.....................Heating and Cooling . 106

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 199.................High-Low Beam Switch . 75..............High-mount Brake Light . 253

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 180

.......................Hood, Opening the . 188

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 286

Ignition..............................................Keys . 79

...........................................Switch . 81............Timing Control System . 294

........................Immobilizer System . 79...Important Handling Information . iii

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............................Infant Restraint . 43......................................Infant Seats . 43

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 257...................................Inside Mirror . 92

.............................Inspection, Tire . 258Installing a Child Seat

.........................................LATCH . 47..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

........................Instrument Panel . 5, 61........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 268.......................................Jack, Tire . 267

................................Jump Starting . 272

..................................................Keys . 79

.......................Label, Certification . 286.................Lane Change, Signaling . 75

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 22...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47

.......................................Lights . 75, 102....................Bulb Replacement . 248

.......................................Indicator . 61.........................................Parking . 75

..................................Turn Signal . 75....................................Load Limits . 194

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 81Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 81............................Fuel Fill Door . 187

....................................Glove Box . 99....................Lockout Prevention . 82

.................................Power Door . 82........................Low Coolant Level . 189.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 67

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 276

Index

I

J

K

L

IV

Page 311: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CONTINUED

..................................Maintenance . 227Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 234.................................Record . 236-237................................Minder . 229-235

.........................Minder Indicator . 69..........................................Safety . 228

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 277..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 88

...............................Meters, Gauges . 70.................................Modifications . 192

.........................................Moonroof . 96

.................................Lower Anchor . 47...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 288

.........................................Luggage . 193

...................Neutral Gear Position . 201..................New Vehicle Break-in . 186

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 286

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 186.........................................Odometer . 70

...............................Odometer, Trip . 70....................Off-Highway Driving . 223...................Off-Road Precautions . 223

Oil........................Change, How to . 240......................Change, When to . 229......................Checking Engine . 189..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 276

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 239

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 293..............................Outside Mirrors . 93

....................Overheating, Engine . 274....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 234

..............Panel Brightness Control . 76........................Park Gear Position . 201

...........................................Parking . 207

.................................Parking Brake . 97Parking Brake and Brake System

...............................Indicator . 63, 278.................................Parking Lights . 75

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 295..........................Playing the Radio . 117

................................Playing a Disc . 130....Playing the Disc Changer . 131, 134

.............................PGM-FI System . 294................Power Seat Adjustments . 87.................Power Socket Locations . 98

..............................Power Windows . 94.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12

...Additional Safety Precautions . 20.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19

........................Protecting Children . 38...........................Protecting Infants . 43

...........Protecting Larger Children . 53.............Protecting Small Children . 44

IndexIN

DE

X

P

M

N

O

V

Page 312: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

...................Radiator Overheating . 274.............Radio/CD Sound System . 115

...........................Readiness Codes . 296...............................Rear A/C Unit . 113

............Rear Audio Control Panel . 147........Rear Entertainment System . 142

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 252.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 184

............................Rear View Mirror . 92.................Rear Window Defogger . 77

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 74..........Reclining the Seat Backs . 87-90

.............................Reminder Lights . 61...............Remoto Audio Controls . 138

.................Remote Control (RES) . 169.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 240

.................................Floor Mats . 254..........................................Fuses . 279

................................Light Bulbs . 248........................................Minder . 235

................................Timing Belt . 245...........................................Tires . 259

.............................Wiper Blades . 255Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 23...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 189

...............................Restraint, Child . 38..................Reverse Gear Position . 201

................................Rotation, Tire . 259

......................................Safety Belts . 10............Safety Defects, Reporting . 302

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 58

...............................Safety Messages . ii.........................................Seat Belts . 10

...............Additional Information . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 23.....................................Cleaning . 254

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22................................Maintenance . 23

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 21, 62

...................System Components . 25...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15....................................Seat Heaters . 86

.................................................Seats . 87............Folding the Second Seat . 89

...............Folding the Third Seat . 90..........................Head Restraints . 91

.........Reclining the Second Seat . 89............Reclining the Third Seat . 90

.......................Third Seat Access . 89...................Seats, Adjusting the . 87-90

............................Security System . 174...............................Serial Number . 286

...........................Service Intervals . 229.............................Service Manual . 303

.........Service Station Procedures . 187..........................Setting the Clock . 140

Shifting the Automatic.............................Transmission . 200

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 200........................Shift Lock Release . 203

Side Marker Lights, Bulb.........................Replacement in . 249

..............................Side Airbags . 11, 31..........................Off Indicator . 34, 63

Index

R

S

VI

Page 313: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

CONTINUED

...............................Signaling Turns . 75.....................................Snow Tires . 260

................................Sound System . 115Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 266............................Specifications . 289

....................Specifications Charts . 288................................Speed Control . 175

..........SRS, Additional Information . 25...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

.............................Airbag Service . 36How the Side Airbag Off

........................Indicator Work . 34..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 28

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31........................SRS Components . 25

.............................SRS Indicator . 33, 63....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81

.......................Starting the Engine . 199In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 199................With a Dead Battery . 272..............State Emissions Testing . 296

........Steam Coming from Engine . 274

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 78

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 81...............................Buttons . 138, 175

...................Stereo Sound System . 115....................Storing Your Vehicle . 263

........................Sunglasses Holder . 100........................................Sun Visor . 101

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 36

.........................SRS Indicator . 33, 63...................System Components . 25

..................................Synthetic Oil . 240

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 252.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 265

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290.....Emissions Control Systems . 293

..........State Emissions Testing . 296Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 295.......................Temperature Gauge . 71

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 114

....................Temperature, Outside . 71...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 23

........Testing of Readiness Codes . 296..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

............................Theft Protection . 139..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 295

..........................Time, Setting the . 140..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 78

....................................Timing Belt . 245

....................................Tire Chains . 261.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 267

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 205

IndexIN

DE

X

T

VII

Page 314: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

...............................................Tires . 257..............................Air Pressure . 257

.........................Checking Wear . 258..........................Compact Spare . 266

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290......................................Inflation . 257

..................................Inspection . 258..............................Maintenance . 259

...................................Replacing . 260......................................Rotating . 259

...........................................Snow . 260............................Specifications . 289

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 267Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 213

....Equipment and Accessories . 219.......................Traction Devices . 261

.............................Weight Limit . 215......................Trailer Driving Tips . 220

Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 244

...........................Fluid Selection . 244..............Identification Number . 286.............Shifting the Automatic . 200

.....................................Treadwear . 290

.......................................Trip Meter . 70....................................Turn Signals . 75

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 265

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 290........................Unleaded Gasoline . 186

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 241

................................Vanity Mirror . 101.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 194

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 288....Vehicle Identification Number . 286

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 211

.........................VSA Off Switch . 212.............................Vehicle Storage . 263

.................................................VIN . 286..................................Viscosity, Oil . 239..................................VTM-4 Lock . 204

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 58

....................Warranty Coverages . 301Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 243............................Level Indicator . 67

.....................................Operation . 74Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 78............Alignment and Balance . 259

..........................Compact Spare . 266...............................Nut Wrench . 269

Windows..................Operating the Power . 94

...........................Rear, Defogger . 77Windshield

...........................Defroster . 108, 110.......................................Washers . 74

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 255

.....................................Operation . 74Rear Window Wiper and

.....................................Washer . 74..................Wireless Headphones . 172

Index

U

V

W

VIII

Emergency Wrecker................. 278

Page 315: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

....................................Worn Tires . 258

IndexIN

DE

X

IX

Wrecker, Emergency Towing...... 278

Page 316: 2006 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Power Steering Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Compact Spare Tire:

Front/Rear:

Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid(see page ).

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

239

244

247

246

245

20.34 US gal (77.0 )